Add PowerPC64 ld --tls-get-addr-optimize.
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item defs
1096 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1097 shared libraries are still allowed.
1098
1099 @item execstack
1100 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
1102 @item global
1103 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
1107 @item initfirst
1108 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113 objects.
1114
1115 @item interpose
1116 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117 but the primary executable.
1118
1119 @item lazy
1120 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123 Lazy binding is the default.
1124
1125 @item loadfltr
1126 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127 runtime.
1128
1129 @item muldefs
1130 Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132 @item nocombreloc
1133 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135 @item nocopyreloc
1136 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1138
1139 @item nodefaultlib
1140 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141 ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143 @item nodelete
1144 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146 @item nodlopen
1147 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149 @item nodump
1150 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
1152 @item noexecstack
1153 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
1155 @item text
1156 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158 @item notext
1159 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161 @item textoff
1162 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
1164 @item norelro
1165 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
1167 @item now
1168 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172 first called.
1173
1174 @item origin
1175 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
1177 @item relro
1178 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
1180 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
1186 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1187 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
1191 @item bndplt
1192 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
1194 @item noextern-protected-data
1195 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199 module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200 i386 and x86-64.
1201
1202 @end table
1203
1204 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1205
1206 @kindex -(
1207 @cindex groups of archives
1208 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1209 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1210 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1211 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1212
1213 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1214 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1215 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1216 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1217 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1218 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1219 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1220 resolved.
1221
1222 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1223 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1224 more archives.
1225
1226 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1227 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1228 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1229 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1230 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1231 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1232 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1233 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1234 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1235 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1236 restore the old behaviour.
1237
1238 @kindex --as-needed
1239 @kindex --no-as-needed
1240 @item --as-needed
1241 @itemx --no-as-needed
1242 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1243 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1244 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1245 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1246 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1247 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1248 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1249 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1250 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1251 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1252 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1253 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1254 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1255
1256 @kindex --add-needed
1257 @kindex --no-add-needed
1258 @item --add-needed
1259 @itemx --no-add-needed
1260 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1261 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1262 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1264
1265 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1266 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1267 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1268
1269 @kindex -Bdynamic
1270 @kindex -dy
1271 @kindex -call_shared
1272 @item -Bdynamic
1273 @itemx -dy
1274 @itemx -call_shared
1275 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1276 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1277 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1278 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1279 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1280 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1281
1282 @kindex -Bgroup
1283 @item -Bgroup
1284 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1285 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1286 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1287 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1288 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1289
1290 @kindex -Bstatic
1291 @kindex -dn
1292 @kindex -non_shared
1293 @kindex -static
1294 @item -Bstatic
1295 @itemx -dn
1296 @itemx -non_shared
1297 @itemx -static
1298 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1299 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1300 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1301 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1302 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1303 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1304 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1305 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1306 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1307 libraries.
1308
1309 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1310 @item -Bsymbolic
1311 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1312 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1313 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1314 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1315 platforms which support shared libraries.
1316
1317 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1318 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1319 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1320 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1321 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1322 libraries.
1323
1324 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1325 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1326 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1327 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1328 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1329 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1330 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1331 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1332 which support shared libraries.
1333
1334 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1335 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1336
1337 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1338 @item --dynamic-list-data
1339 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1340
1341 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1342 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1343 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1344 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1345
1346 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1347 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1348 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1349
1350 @kindex --check-sections
1351 @kindex --no-check-sections
1352 @item --check-sections
1353 @itemx --no-check-sections
1354 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1355 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1356 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1357 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1358 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1359 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1360 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1361 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1362 option.
1363
1364 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1365 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1366 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1367 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1368 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1369 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1370 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1371 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1372 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1373 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1374 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1375 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1376
1377 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1378 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1379 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1380 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1381 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1382 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1383 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1384 symbols.
1385
1386 @cindex cross reference table
1387 @kindex --cref
1388 @item --cref
1389 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1390 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1391 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1392
1393 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1394 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1395 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1396 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1397 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1398 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1399 symbol are listed.
1400
1401 @cindex common allocation
1402 @kindex --no-define-common
1403 @item --no-define-common
1404 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1405 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1406 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1407
1408 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1409 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1410 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1411 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1412 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1413 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1414 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1415 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1416 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1417 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1418
1419 @cindex symbols, from command line
1420 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1421 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1422 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1423 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1424 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1425 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1426 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1427 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1428 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1429 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1430 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1431 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1432
1433 @cindex demangling, from command line
1434 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1435 @kindex --no-demangle
1436 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1437 @itemx --no-demangle
1438 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1439 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1440 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1441 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1442 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1443 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1444 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1445 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1446 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1447
1448 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1449 @kindex -I@var{file}
1450 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1451 @item -I@var{file}
1452 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1453 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1454 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1455 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1456 doing.
1457
1458 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1459 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1460 @item --fatal-warnings
1461 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1462 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1463 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1464
1465 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1466 @item --force-exe-suffix
1467 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1468
1469 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1470 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1471 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1472 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1473 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1474 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1475
1476 @kindex --gc-sections
1477 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1478 @cindex garbage collection
1479 @item --gc-sections
1480 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1481 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1482 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1483 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1484 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1485 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1486 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1487
1488 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1489 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1490 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1491 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1492 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1493 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1494 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1495 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1496 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1497
1498 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1499 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1500 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1501 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1502
1503 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1504 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1505 @cindex garbage collection
1506 @item --print-gc-sections
1507 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1508 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1509 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1510 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1511 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1512 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1513 line.
1514
1515 @kindex --print-output-format
1516 @cindex output format
1517 @item --print-output-format
1518 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1519 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1520 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1521
1522 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1523 @cindex memory usage
1524 @item --print-memory-usage
1525 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1526 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1527 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1528 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1529 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1530
1531 @smallexample
1532 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1533 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1534 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1535 @end smallexample
1536
1537 @cindex help
1538 @cindex usage
1539 @kindex --help
1540 @item --help
1541 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1542
1543 @kindex --target-help
1544 @item --target-help
1545 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1546
1547 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1548 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1549 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1550 @option{-M} option, above.
1551
1552 @cindex memory usage
1553 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1554 @item --no-keep-memory
1555 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1556 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1557 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1558 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1559 while linking a large executable.
1560
1561 @kindex --no-undefined
1562 @kindex -z defs
1563 @item --no-undefined
1564 @itemx -z defs
1565 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1566 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1567 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1568 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1569 libraries being linked in.
1570
1571 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1572 @kindex -z muldefs
1573 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1574 @itemx -z muldefs
1575 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1576 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1577 first definition will be used.
1578
1579 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1580 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1581 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1582 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1583 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1584 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1585 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1586 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1587 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1588
1589 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1590 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1591 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1592 a shared library.
1593
1594 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1595 libraries specified at link time are that:
1596
1597 @itemize @bullet
1598 @item
1599 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1600 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1601 resolvable at load time.
1602 @item
1603 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1604 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1605
1606 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1607 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1608 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1609 appropriate memset function.
1610 @end itemize
1611
1612 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1613 @item --no-undefined-version
1614 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1615 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1616 will be issued instead.
1617
1618 @kindex --default-symver
1619 @item --default-symver
1620 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1621 exported symbols.
1622
1623 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1624 @item --default-imported-symver
1625 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1626 imported symbols.
1627
1628 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1629 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1630 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1631 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1632 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1633 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1634 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1635 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1636 inappropriate.
1637
1638 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1639 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1640 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1641 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1642
1643 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1644 @item --no-whole-archive
1645 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1646 archive files.
1647
1648 @cindex output file after errors
1649 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1650 @item --noinhibit-exec
1651 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1652 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1653 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1654 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1655
1656 @kindex -nostdlib
1657 @item -nostdlib
1658 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1659 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1660 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1661
1662 @ifclear SingleFormat
1663 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1664 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1665 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1666 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1667 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1668 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1669 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1670 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1671 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1672 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1673 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1674 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1675 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1676 @end ifclear
1677
1678 @kindex -pie
1679 @kindex --pic-executable
1680 @item -pie
1681 @itemx --pic-executable
1682 @cindex position independent executables
1683 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1684 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1685 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1686 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1687 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1688 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1689
1690 @kindex -qmagic
1691 @item -qmagic
1692 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1693
1694 @kindex -Qy
1695 @item -Qy
1696 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1697
1698 @kindex --relax
1699 @cindex synthesizing linker
1700 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1701 @cindex --no-relax
1702 @item --relax
1703 @itemx --no-relax
1704 An option with machine dependent effects.
1705 @ifset GENERIC
1706 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1707 @end ifset
1708 @ifset H8300
1709 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1710 @end ifset
1711 @ifset I960
1712 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1713 @end ifset
1714 @ifset XTENSA
1715 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1716 @end ifset
1717 @ifset M68HC11
1718 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1719 @end ifset
1720 @ifset NIOSII
1721 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1722 @end ifset
1723 @ifset POWERPC
1724 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1725 @end ifset
1726
1727 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1728 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1729 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1730 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1731 instructions, and combining constant values.
1732
1733 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1734 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1735 @ifset GENERIC
1736 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1737 family of processors.
1738 @end ifset
1739
1740 @ifset GENERIC
1741 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1742 but ignored.
1743 @end ifset
1744
1745 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1746 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1747
1748 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1749 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1750 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1751 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1752 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1753 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1754 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1755 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1756 @ifset GENERIC
1757 (such as VxWorks)
1758 @end ifset
1759 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1760 run-time memory.
1761
1762 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1763 or symbols needed for relocations.
1764
1765 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1766 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1767
1768 @ifset GENERIC
1769 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1770 @cindex runtime library search path
1771 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1772 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1773 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1774 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1775 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1776 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1777 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1778 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1779 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1780 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1781
1782 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1783 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1784 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1785 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1786 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1787 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1788 file systems.
1789
1790 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1791 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1792 the @option{-rpath} option.
1793 @end ifset
1794
1795 @ifset GENERIC
1796 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1797 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1798 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1799 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1800 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1801 of the input files.
1802
1803 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1804 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1805 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1806 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1807 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1808 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1809 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1810 appearing multiple times.
1811
1812 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1813 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1814 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1815 runtime linker would do.
1816
1817 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1818 libraries:
1819 @enumerate
1820 @item
1821 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1822 @item
1823 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1824 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1825 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1826 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1827 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1828 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1829 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1830 @item
1831 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1832 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1833 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1834 @item
1835 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1836 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1837 @item
1838 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1839 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1840 @item
1841 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1842 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1843 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1844 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1845 @item
1846 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1847 @item
1848 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1849 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1850 @end enumerate
1851
1852 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1853 warning and continue with the link.
1854 @end ifset
1855
1856 @kindex -shared
1857 @kindex -Bshareable
1858 @item -shared
1859 @itemx -Bshareable
1860 @cindex shared libraries
1861 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1862 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1863 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1864 undefined symbols in the link.
1865
1866 @kindex --sort-common
1867 @item --sort-common
1868 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1869 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1870 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1871 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1872 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1873 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1874 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1875 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1876
1877 @kindex --sort-section=name
1878 @item --sort-section=name
1879 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1880 patterns in the linker script.
1881
1882 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1883 @item --sort-section=alignment
1884 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1885 patterns in the linker script.
1886
1887 @kindex --split-by-file
1888 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1889 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1890 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1891 size of 1 if not given.
1892
1893 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1894 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1895 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1896 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1897 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1898 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1899 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1900 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1901 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1902 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1903 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1904 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1905
1906 @kindex --stats
1907 @item --stats
1908 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1909 as execution time and memory usage.
1910
1911 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1912 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1913 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1914 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1915 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1916
1917 @kindex --traditional-format
1918 @cindex traditional format
1919 @item --traditional-format
1920 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1921 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1922 use the traditional format instead.
1923
1924 @cindex dbx
1925 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1926 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1927 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1928 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1929 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1930 combine duplicate entries.
1931
1932 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1933 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1934 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1935 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1936 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1937 line.
1938 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1939 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1940 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1941 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1942 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1943
1944 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1945 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1946 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1947 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1948 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1949 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1950 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1951 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1952 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1953
1954 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1955 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1956 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1957 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1958 byte of the text segment.
1959
1960 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1961 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1962 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1963 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1964 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1965 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1966
1967 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1968 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1969 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1970 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1971 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1972
1973 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1974 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1975 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1976 values for @samp{method}:
1977
1978 @table @samp
1979 @item ignore-all
1980 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1981
1982 @item report-all
1983 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1984
1985 @item ignore-in-object-files
1986 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1987 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1988
1989 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1990 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1991 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1992 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1993 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1994 command line.
1995 @end table
1996
1997 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1998 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1999
2000 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2001 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2002 can change this to a warning.
2003
2004 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2005 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2006 @item --dll-verbose
2007 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2008 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2009 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2010 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2011 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2012
2013 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2014 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2015 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2016 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2017 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2018 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2019 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2020 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2021 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2022 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2023 @xref{WIN32}.
2024
2025 @kindex --warn-common
2026 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2027 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2028 @item --warn-common
2029 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2030 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2031 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2032 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2033 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2034 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2035
2036 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2037
2038 @table @samp
2039 @item int i = 1;
2040 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2041 file.
2042
2043 @item extern int i;
2044 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2045 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2046 variable somewhere.
2047
2048 @item int i;
2049 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2050 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2051 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2052 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2053 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2054 a definition of the same variable.
2055 @end table
2056
2057 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2058 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2059 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2060 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2061 a common symbol.
2062
2063 @enumerate
2064 @item
2065 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2066 definition for the symbol.
2067 @smallexample
2068 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2069 overridden by definition
2070 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2071 @end smallexample
2072
2073 @item
2074 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2075 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2076 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2077 @smallexample
2078 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2079 overriding common
2080 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2081 @end smallexample
2082
2083 @item
2084 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2085 @smallexample
2086 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2087 of `@var{symbol}'
2088 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2089 @end smallexample
2090
2091 @item
2092 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2093 @smallexample
2094 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2095 overridden by larger common
2096 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2097 @end smallexample
2098
2099 @item
2100 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2101 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2102 encountered in a different order.
2103 @smallexample
2104 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2105 overriding smaller common
2106 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2107 @end smallexample
2108 @end enumerate
2109
2110 @kindex --warn-constructors
2111 @item --warn-constructors
2112 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2113 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2114 detect the use of global constructors.
2115
2116 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2117 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2118 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2119 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2120 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2121 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2122 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2123 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2124 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2125 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2126 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2127 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2128 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2129
2130 @kindex --warn-once
2131 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2132 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2133 @item --warn-once
2134 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2135 which refers to it.
2136
2137 @kindex --warn-section-align
2138 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2139 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2140 @item --warn-section-align
2141 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2142 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2143 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2144 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2145 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2146
2147 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2148 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2149 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2150
2151 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2152 @item --warn-alternate-em
2153 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2154
2155 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2156 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2157 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2158 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2159 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2160
2161 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2162 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2163 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2164 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2165
2166 @kindex --whole-archive
2167 @cindex including an entire archive
2168 @item --whole-archive
2169 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2170 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2171 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2172 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2173 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2174 library. This option may be used more than once.
2175
2176 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2177 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2178 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2179 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2180 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2181
2182 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2183 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2184 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2185 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2186 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2187 @var{symbol}.
2188
2189 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2190 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2191 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2192 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2193
2194 Here is a trivial example:
2195
2196 @smallexample
2197 void *
2198 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2199 @{
2200 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2201 return __real_malloc (c);
2202 @}
2203 @end smallexample
2204
2205 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2206 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2207 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2208 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2209
2210 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2211 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2212 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2213 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2214 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2215
2216 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2217 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2218 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2219 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2220
2221 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2222 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2223 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2224 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2225 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2226
2227 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2228 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2229 @item --enable-new-dtags
2230 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2231 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2232 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2233 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2234 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2235 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2236 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2237 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2238
2239 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2240 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2241 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2242 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2243 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2244 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2245 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2246
2247 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2248 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2249 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2250 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2251 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2252 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2253 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2254
2255 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2256 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2257 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2258 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2259 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2260 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2261 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2262 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2263 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2264 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2265 compress DWARF debug sections.
2266 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2267 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2268 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2269 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2270 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2271
2272 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2273 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2274 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2275 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2276 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2277 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2278
2279 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2280 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2281 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2282 has been used.
2283
2284 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2285 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2286
2287 @kindex --build-id
2288 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2289 @item --build-id
2290 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2291 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2292 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2293 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2294 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2295 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2296 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2297 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2298 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2299 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2300 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2301
2302 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2303 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2304 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2305 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2306 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2307 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2308
2309 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2310 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2311 @end table
2312
2313 @c man end
2314
2315 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2316
2317 @c man begin OPTIONS
2318
2319 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2320 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2321 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2322 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2323 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2324 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2325 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2326 object file).
2327
2328 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2329 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2330 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2331 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2332
2333 @table @gcctabopt
2334
2335 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2336 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2337 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2338 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2339 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2340
2341 @kindex --base-file
2342 @item --base-file @var{file}
2343 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2344 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2345 @file{dlltool}.
2346 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2347
2348 @kindex --dll
2349 @item --dll
2350 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2351 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2352 file.
2353 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2354
2355 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2356 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2357 @item --enable-long-section-names
2358 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2359 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2360 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2361 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2362 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2363 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2364 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2365 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2366 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2367 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2368 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2369 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2370 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2371 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2372 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2373 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2374 image and not stripping symbols.
2375 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2376
2377 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2378 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2379 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2380 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2381 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2382 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2383 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2384 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2385 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2386 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2387 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2388 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2389 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2390 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2391 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2392 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2393 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2394 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2395
2396 @kindex --leading-underscore
2397 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2398 @item --leading-underscore
2399 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2400 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2401 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2402 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2403
2404 @cindex DLLs, creating
2405 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2406 @item --export-all-symbols
2407 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2408 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2409 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2410 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2411 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2412 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2413 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2414 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2415 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2416 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2417 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2418 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2419 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2420 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2421 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2422 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2423 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2424 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2425 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2426 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2427 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2428 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2429 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2430
2431 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2432 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2433 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2434 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2435 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2436
2437 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2438 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2439 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2440 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2441
2442 @kindex --file-alignment
2443 @item --file-alignment
2444 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2445 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2446 512.
2447 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2448
2449 @cindex heap size
2450 @kindex --heap
2451 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2452 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2453 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2454 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2455 committed.
2456 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2457
2458 @cindex image base
2459 @kindex --image-base
2460 @item --image-base @var{value}
2461 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2462 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2463 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2464 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2465 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2466 for dlls.
2467 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2468
2469 @kindex --kill-at
2470 @item --kill-at
2471 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2472 symbols before they are exported.
2473 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2474
2475 @kindex --large-address-aware
2476 @item --large-address-aware
2477 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2478 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2479 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2480 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2481 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2482 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2483
2484 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2485 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2486 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2487 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2488 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2489 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2490 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2491
2492 @kindex --major-image-version
2493 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2494 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2495 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2496
2497 @kindex --major-os-version
2498 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2499 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2500 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2501
2502 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2503 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2504 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2505 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2506
2507 @kindex --minor-image-version
2508 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2509 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2510 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2511
2512 @kindex --minor-os-version
2513 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2514 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2515 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2516
2517 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2518 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2519 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2520 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2521
2522 @cindex DEF files, creating
2523 @cindex DLLs, creating
2524 @kindex --output-def
2525 @item --output-def @var{file}
2526 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2527 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2528 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2529 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2530 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2531 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2532
2533 @cindex DLLs, creating
2534 @kindex --out-implib
2535 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2536 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2537 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2538 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2539 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2540 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2541 creation step.
2542 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2543
2544 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2545 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2546 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2547 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2548 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2549 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2550 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2551 execution are avoided.
2552 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2555 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2556 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2557 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2558 default.
2559 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2560
2561 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2562 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2563 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2564 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2565 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2566 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2567 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2568 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2569 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2570 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2571
2572 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2573 @item --enable-auto-import
2574 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2575 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2576 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2577 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2578 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2579 specification published by Microsoft.
2580
2581 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2582 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2583 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2584 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2585 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2586
2587 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2588 see this message:
2589
2590 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2591 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2592
2593 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2594 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2595 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2596 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2597 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2598 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2599 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2600 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2601 the warning, and exit.
2602
2603 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2604 data type of the exported variable:
2605
2606 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2607 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2608 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2609
2610 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2611 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2612 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2613 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2614
2615 @example
2616 extern type extern_array[];
2617 extern_array[1] -->
2618 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2619 @end example
2620
2621 or
2622
2623 @example
2624 extern type extern_array[];
2625 extern_array[1] -->
2626 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2627 @end example
2628
2629 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2630 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2631
2632 @example
2633 extern struct s extern_struct;
2634 extern_struct.field -->
2635 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2636 @end example
2637
2638 or
2639
2640 @example
2641 extern long long extern_ll;
2642 extern_ll -->
2643 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2644 @end example
2645
2646 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2647 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2648 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2649 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2650 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2651 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2652 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2653 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2654
2655 Original:
2656 @example
2657 --foo.h
2658 extern int arr[];
2659 --foo.c
2660 #include "foo.h"
2661 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2662 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2663 @}
2664 @end example
2665
2666 Solution 1:
2667 @example
2668 --foo.h
2669 extern int arr[];
2670 --foo.c
2671 #include "foo.h"
2672 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2673 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2674 volatile int *parr = arr;
2675 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2676 @}
2677 @end example
2678
2679 Solution 2:
2680 @example
2681 --foo.h
2682 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2683 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2684 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2685 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2686 #else
2687 #define FOO_IMPORT
2688 #endif
2689 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2690 --foo.c
2691 #include "foo.h"
2692 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2693 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2694 @}
2695 @end example
2696
2697 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2698 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2699 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2700 functions).
2701 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2702
2703 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2704 @item --disable-auto-import
2705 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2706 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2707 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2708
2709 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2710 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2711 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2712 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2713 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2714 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2715 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2716
2717 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2718 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2719 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2720 DLLs.
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2722
2723 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2724 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2725 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2726 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2727
2728 @kindex --section-alignment
2729 @item --section-alignment
2730 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2731 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @cindex stack size
2735 @kindex --stack
2736 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2737 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2738 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2739 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2740 committed.
2741 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2742
2743 @kindex --subsystem
2744 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2745 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2746 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2747 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2748 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2749 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2750 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2751 @var{which}.
2752 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2753
2754 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2755 of the PE file header:
2756 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2757
2758 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2759 @item --high-entropy-va
2760 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2761 (ASLR).
2762
2763 @kindex --dynamicbase
2764 @item --dynamicbase
2765 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2766 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2767 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2768
2769 @kindex --forceinteg
2770 @item --forceinteg
2771 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2772
2773 @kindex --nxcompat
2774 @item --nxcompat
2775 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2776 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2777
2778 @kindex --no-isolation
2779 @item --no-isolation
2780 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2781
2782 @kindex --no-seh
2783 @item --no-seh
2784 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2785 this image.
2786
2787 @kindex --no-bind
2788 @item --no-bind
2789 Do not bind this image.
2790
2791 @kindex --wdmdriver
2792 @item --wdmdriver
2793 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2794
2795 @kindex --tsaware
2796 @item --tsaware
2797 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2798
2799 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2800 @item --insert-timestamp
2801 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2802 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2803 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2804 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2805 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2806 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2807 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2808 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2809 identically.
2810 @end table
2811
2812 @c man end
2813
2814 @ifset C6X
2815 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2816
2817 @c man begin OPTIONS
2818
2819 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2820 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2821 all executables use an index of 0.
2822
2823 @table @gcctabopt
2824
2825 @kindex --dsbt-size
2826 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2827 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2828 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2829 entries.
2830
2831 @kindex --dsbt-index
2832 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2833 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2834 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2835 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2836 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2837
2838 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2839 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2840 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2841
2842 @end table
2843
2844 @c man end
2845 @end ifset
2846
2847 @ifset M68HC11
2848 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2849
2850 @c man begin OPTIONS
2851
2852 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2853 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2854
2855 @table @gcctabopt
2856
2857 @kindex --no-trampoline
2858 @item --no-trampoline
2859 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2860 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2861 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2862
2863 @kindex --bank-window
2864 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2865 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2866 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2867 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2868 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2869
2870 @end table
2871
2872 @c man end
2873 @end ifset
2874
2875 @ifset M68K
2876 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2877
2878 @c man begin OPTIONS
2879
2880 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2881 when linking for 68K targets.
2882
2883 @table @gcctabopt
2884
2885 @kindex --got
2886 @item --got=@var{type}
2887 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2888 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2889 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2890 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2891
2892 @end table
2893
2894 @c man end
2895 @end ifset
2896
2897 @ifset MIPS
2898 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2899
2900 @c man begin OPTIONS
2901
2902 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2903 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2904
2905 @table @gcctabopt
2906
2907 @kindex --insn32
2908 @item --insn32
2909 @kindex --no-insn32
2910 @itemx --no-insn32
2911 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2912 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2913 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2914 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2915 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2916 possible.
2917
2918 @end table
2919
2920 @c man end
2921 @end ifset
2922
2923 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2924 @node Environment
2925 @section Environment Variables
2926
2927 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2928
2929 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2930 @ifclear SingleFormat
2931 @code{GNUTARGET},
2932 @end ifclear
2933 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2934
2935 @ifclear SingleFormat
2936 @kindex GNUTARGET
2937 @cindex default input format
2938 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2939 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2940 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2941 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2942 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2943 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2944 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2945 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2946 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2947 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2948 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2949 @end ifclear
2950
2951 @kindex LDEMULATION
2952 @cindex default emulation
2953 @cindex emulation, default
2954 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2955 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2956 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2957 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2958 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2959 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2960 linker was configured.
2961
2962 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2963 @cindex demangling, default
2964 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2965 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2966 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2967 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2968 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2969 options.
2970
2971 @c man end
2972 @end ifset
2973
2974 @node Scripts
2975 @chapter Linker Scripts
2976
2977 @cindex scripts
2978 @cindex linker scripts
2979 @cindex command files
2980 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2981 written in the linker command language.
2982
2983 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2984 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2985 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2986 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2987 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2988 described below.
2989
2990 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2991 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2992 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2993 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2994 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2995
2996 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2997 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2998 default linker script.
2999
3000 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3001 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3002 Linker Scripts}.
3003
3004 @menu
3005 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3006 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3007 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3008 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3009 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3010 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3011 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3012 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3013 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3014 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3015 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3016 @end menu
3017
3018 @node Basic Script Concepts
3019 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3020 @cindex linker script concepts
3021 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3022 describe the linker script language.
3023
3024 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3025 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3026 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3027 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3028 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3029 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3030 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3031 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3032
3033 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3034 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3035 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3036 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3037 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3038 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3039 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3040 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3041 of debugging information.
3042
3043 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3044 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3045 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3046 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3047 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3048 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3049 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3050 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3051 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3052 RAM address would be the VMA.
3053
3054 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3055 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3056
3057 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3058 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3059 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3060 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3061 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3062 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3063 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3064
3065 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3066 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3067 option.
3068
3069 @node Script Format
3070 @section Linker Script Format
3071 @cindex linker script format
3072 Linker scripts are text files.
3073
3074 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3075 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3076 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3077 generally ignored.
3078
3079 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3080 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3081 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3082 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3083 file name.
3084
3085 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3086 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3087 to whitespace.
3088
3089 @node Simple Example
3090 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3091 @cindex linker script example
3092 @cindex example of linker script
3093 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3094
3095 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3096 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3097 memory layout of the output file.
3098
3099 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3100 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3101 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3102 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3103 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3104 your input files.
3105
3106 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3107 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3108 linker script which will do that:
3109 @smallexample
3110 SECTIONS
3111 @{
3112 . = 0x10000;
3113 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3114 . = 0x8000000;
3115 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3116 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3117 @}
3118 @end smallexample
3119
3120 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3121 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3122 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3123
3124 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3125 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3126 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3127 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3128 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3129 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3130 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3131
3132 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3133 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3134 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3135 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3136 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3137 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3138
3139 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3140 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3141 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3142
3143 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3144 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3145 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3146 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3147 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3148 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3149 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3150
3151 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3152 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3153 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3154 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3155 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3156 sections.
3157
3158 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3159
3160 @node Simple Commands
3161 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3162 @cindex linker script simple commands
3163 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3164
3165 @menu
3166 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3167 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3168 @ifclear SingleFormat
3169 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3170 @end ifclear
3171
3172 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3173 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3174 @end menu
3175
3176 @node Entry Point
3177 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3178 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3179 @cindex start of execution
3180 @cindex first instruction
3181 @cindex entry point
3182 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3183 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3184 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3185 @smallexample
3186 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3187 @end smallexample
3188
3189 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3190 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3191 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3192 @itemize @bullet
3193 @item
3194 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3195 @item
3196 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3197 @item
3198 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3199 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3200 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3201 @item
3202 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3203 @item
3204 The address @code{0}.
3205 @end itemize
3206
3207 @node File Commands
3208 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3209 @cindex linker script file commands
3210 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3211
3212 @table @code
3213 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3214 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3215 @cindex including a linker script
3216 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3217 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3218 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3219 10 levels deep.
3220
3221 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3222 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3223
3224 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3225 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3226 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3227 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3228 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3229 @cindex linker script input object files
3230 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3231 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3232
3233 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3234 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3235 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3236
3237 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3238 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3239
3240 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3241 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3242 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3243 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3244 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3245 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3246 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3247 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3248 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3249
3250 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3251 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3252 @samp{-l}.
3253
3254 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3255 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3256 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3257
3258 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3259 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3260 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3261 @cindex grouping input files
3262 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3263 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3264 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3265 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3266
3267 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3268 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3269 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3270 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3271 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3272 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3273 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3274 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3275 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3276 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3277 setting afterwards.
3278
3279 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3280 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3281 @cindex output file name in linker script
3282 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3283 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3284 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3285 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3286 precedence.
3287
3288 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3289 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3290
3291 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3292 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3293 @cindex library search path in linker script
3294 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3295 @cindex search path in linker script
3296 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3297 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3298 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3299 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3300 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3301 the command line option are searched first.
3302
3303 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3304 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3305 @cindex first input file
3306 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3307 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3308 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3309 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3310 first file.
3311 @end table
3312
3313 @ifclear SingleFormat
3314 @node Format Commands
3315 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3316 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3317
3318 @table @code
3319 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3320 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3321 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3322 @cindex output file format in linker script
3323 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3324 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3325 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3326 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3327 line option takes precedence.
3328
3329 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3330 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3331 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3332 desired endianness.
3333
3334 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3335 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3336 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3337 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3338
3339 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3340 command:
3341 @smallexample
3342 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3343 @end smallexample
3344 This says that the default format for the output file is
3345 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3346 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3347 format.
3348
3349 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3350 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3351 @cindex input file format in linker script
3352 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3353 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3354 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3355 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3356 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3357 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3358 @end table
3359 @end ifclear
3360
3361 @node REGION_ALIAS
3362 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3363 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3364 @cindex region alias
3365 @cindex region names
3366
3367 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3368 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3369
3370 @smallexample
3371 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3372 @end smallexample
3373
3374 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3375 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3376 to memory regions. An example follows.
3377
3378 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3379 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3380 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3381 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3382 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3383 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3384 sections:
3385
3386 @itemize @bullet
3387 @item
3388 @code{.text} program code;
3389 @item
3390 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3391 @item
3392 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3393 @item
3394 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3395 @end itemize
3396
3397 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3398 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3399 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3400 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3401 @code{C}:
3402 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3403 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3404 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3405 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3406 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3407 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3408 @end multitable
3409 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3410 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3411 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3412 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3413
3414 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3415 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3416 memory layout:
3417 @smallexample
3418 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3419
3420 SECTIONS
3421 @{
3422 .text :
3423 @{
3424 *(.text)
3425 @} > REGION_TEXT
3426 .rodata :
3427 @{
3428 *(.rodata)
3429 rodata_end = .;
3430 @} > REGION_RODATA
3431 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3432 @{
3433 data_start = .;
3434 *(.data)
3435 @} > REGION_DATA
3436 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3437 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3438 .bss :
3439 @{
3440 *(.bss)
3441 @} > REGION_BSS
3442 @}
3443 @end smallexample
3444
3445 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3446 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3447 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3448 @table @code
3449 @item A
3450 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3451 @smallexample
3452 MEMORY
3453 @{
3454 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3455 @}
3456
3457 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3458 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3459 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3460 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3461 @end smallexample
3462 @item B
3463 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3464 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3465 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3466 @smallexample
3467 MEMORY
3468 @{
3469 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3470 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3471 @}
3472
3473 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3474 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3475 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3476 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3477 @end smallexample
3478 @item C
3479 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3480 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3481 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3482 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3483 @smallexample
3484 MEMORY
3485 @{
3486 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3487 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3488 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3489 @}
3490
3491 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3492 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3493 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3494 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3495 @end smallexample
3496 @end table
3497
3498 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3499 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3500 necessary:
3501 @smallexample
3502 #include <string.h>
3503
3504 extern char data_start [];
3505 extern char data_size [];
3506 extern char data_load_start [];
3507
3508 void copy_data(void)
3509 @{
3510 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3511 @{
3512 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3513 @}
3514 @}
3515 @end smallexample
3516
3517 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3518 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3519 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3520
3521 @table @code
3522 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3523 @kindex ASSERT
3524 @cindex assertion in linker script
3525 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3526 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3527
3528 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3529 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3530 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3531 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3532 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3533
3534 @smallexample
3535 .stack :
3536 @{
3537 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3538 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3539 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3540 @}
3541 @end smallexample
3542
3543 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3544 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3545 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3546
3547 @smallexample
3548 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3549 .stack :
3550 @{
3551 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3552 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3553 @}
3554 @end smallexample
3555
3556 will work.
3557
3558 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3559 @kindex EXTERN
3560 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3561 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3562 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3563 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3564 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3565 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3566
3567 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3568 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3569 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3570 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3571 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3572 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3573
3574 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3575 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3576 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3577 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3578 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3579 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3580
3581 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3582 @kindex INSERT
3583 @cindex insert user script into default script
3584 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3585 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3586 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3587 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3588 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3589 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3590 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3591 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3592 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3593 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3594 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3595 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3596 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3597
3598 @smallexample
3599 SECTIONS
3600 @{
3601 OVERLAY :
3602 @{
3603 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3604 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3605 @}
3606 @}
3607 INSERT AFTER .text;
3608 @end smallexample
3609
3610 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3611 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3612 @cindex cross references
3613 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3614 references among certain output sections.
3615
3616 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3617 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3618 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3619 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3620 a function defined in the other section.
3621
3622 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3623 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3624 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3625 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3626 names.
3627
3628 @ifclear SingleFormat
3629 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3630 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3631 @cindex machine architecture
3632 @cindex architecture
3633 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3634 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3635 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3636 the @samp{-f} option.
3637 @end ifclear
3638
3639 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3640 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3641 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3642 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3643 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3644 @xref{Expression Section}.
3645 @end table
3646
3647 @node Assignments
3648 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3649 @cindex assignment in scripts
3650 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3651 @cindex variables, defining
3652 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3653 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3654
3655 @menu
3656 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3657 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3658 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3659 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3660 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3661 @end menu
3662
3663 @node Simple Assignments
3664 @subsection Simple Assignments
3665
3666 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3667
3668 @table @code
3669 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3670 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3671 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3672 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3673 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3674 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3675 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3676 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3677 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3678 @end table
3679
3680 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3681 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3682 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3683
3684 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3685 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3686
3687 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3688
3689 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3690
3691 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3692 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3693 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3694
3695 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3696 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3697
3698 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3699 assignments may be used:
3700
3701 @smallexample
3702 floating_point = 0;
3703 SECTIONS
3704 @{
3705 .text :
3706 @{
3707 *(.text)
3708 _etext = .;
3709 @}
3710 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3711 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3712 @}
3713 @end smallexample
3714 @noindent
3715 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3716 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3717 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3718 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3719 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3720
3721 @node HIDDEN
3722 @subsection HIDDEN
3723 @cindex HIDDEN
3724 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3725 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3726
3727 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3728 @code{HIDDEN}:
3729
3730 @smallexample
3731 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3732 SECTIONS
3733 @{
3734 .text :
3735 @{
3736 *(.text)
3737 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3738 @}
3739 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3740 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3741 @}
3742 @end smallexample
3743 @noindent
3744 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3745
3746 @node PROVIDE
3747 @subsection PROVIDE
3748 @cindex PROVIDE
3749 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3750 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3751 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3752 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3753 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3754 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3755 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3756 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3757
3758 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3759 @smallexample
3760 SECTIONS
3761 @{
3762 .text :
3763 @{
3764 *(.text)
3765 _etext = .;
3766 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3767 @}
3768 @}
3769 @end smallexample
3770
3771 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3772 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3773 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3774 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3775 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3776 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3777
3778 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3779 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3780 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3781 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3782 hidden and won't be exported.
3783
3784 @node Source Code Reference
3785 @subsection Source Code Reference
3786
3787 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3788 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3789 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3790 symbol that does not have a value.
3791
3792 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3793 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3794 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3795 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3796 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3797 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3798 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3799 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3800
3801 @smallexample
3802 extern int foo;
3803 @end smallexample
3804
3805 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3806
3807 @smallexample
3808 _foo = 1000;
3809 @end smallexample
3810
3811 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3812 transformation has taken place.
3813
3814 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3815 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3816 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3817 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3818 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3819 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3820 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 int foo = 1000;
3824 @end smallexample
3825
3826 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3827 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3828 number 1000 is initially stored.
3829
3830 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3831 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3832 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3833 So:
3834
3835 @smallexample
3836 foo = 1;
3837 @end smallexample
3838
3839 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3840 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3841 address. Whereas:
3842
3843 @smallexample
3844 int * a = & foo;
3845 @end smallexample
3846
3847 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3848 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3849 the variable @samp{a}.
3850
3851 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3852 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3853 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3854
3855 @smallexample
3856 foo = 1000;
3857 @end smallexample
3858
3859 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3860 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3861 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3862 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3863 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3864
3865 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3866 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3867 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3868 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3869 linker script contains these declarations:
3870
3871 @smallexample
3872 @group
3873 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3874 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3875 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3876 @end group
3877 @end smallexample
3878
3879 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3880
3881 @smallexample
3882 @group
3883 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3884
3885 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3886 @end group
3887 @end smallexample
3888
3889 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3890 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3891 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 @group
3895 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3896
3897 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3898 @end group
3899 @end smallexample
3900
3901 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3902 operators.
3903
3904 @node SECTIONS
3905 @section SECTIONS Command
3906 @kindex SECTIONS
3907 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3908 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3909
3910 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3911 @smallexample
3912 SECTIONS
3913 @{
3914 @var{sections-command}
3915 @var{sections-command}
3916 @dots{}
3917 @}
3918 @end smallexample
3919
3920 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3921
3922 @itemize @bullet
3923 @item
3924 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3925 @item
3926 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3927 @item
3928 an output section description
3929 @item
3930 an overlay description
3931 @end itemize
3932
3933 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3934 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3935 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3936 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3937 the layout of the output file.
3938
3939 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3940 below.
3941
3942 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3943 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3944 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3945 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3946 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3947 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3948
3949 @menu
3950 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3951 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3952 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3953 * Input Section:: Input section description
3954 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3955 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3956 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3957 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3958 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3959 @end menu
3960
3961 @node Output Section Description
3962 @subsection Output Section Description
3963 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3964 @smallexample
3965 @group
3966 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3967 [AT(@var{lma})]
3968 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3969 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3970 [@var{constraint}]
3971 @{
3972 @var{output-section-command}
3973 @var{output-section-command}
3974 @dots{}
3975 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3976 @end group
3977 @end smallexample
3978
3979 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3980
3981 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3982 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3983 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3984 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3985 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3986
3987 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3988
3989 @itemize @bullet
3990 @item
3991 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3992 @item
3993 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3994 @item
3995 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3996 @item
3997 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3998 @end itemize
3999
4000 @node Output Section Name
4001 @subsection Output Section Name
4002 @cindex name, section
4003 @cindex section name
4004 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4005 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4006 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4007 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4008 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4009 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4010 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4011 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4012 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4013 commas must be quoted.
4014
4015 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4016 Discarding}.
4017
4018 @node Output Section Address
4019 @subsection Output Section Address
4020 @cindex address, section
4021 @cindex section address
4022 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4023 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4024 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4025
4026 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4027 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4028 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4029 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4030 contained within the output section.
4031
4032 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4033
4034 @itemize @bullet
4035 @item
4036 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4037 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4038 in that region.
4039
4040 @item
4041 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4042 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4043 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4044 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4045
4046 @item
4047 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4048 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4049 counter.
4050 @end itemize
4051
4052 @noindent
4053 For example:
4054
4055 @smallexample
4056 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4057 @end smallexample
4058
4059 @noindent
4060 and
4061
4062 @smallexample
4063 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4064 @end smallexample
4065
4066 @noindent
4067 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4068 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4069 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4070 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4071 input sections.
4072
4073 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4074 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4075 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4076 do something like this:
4077 @smallexample
4078 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4079 @end smallexample
4080 @noindent
4081 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4082 aligned upward to the specified value.
4083
4084 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4085 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4086 sections are ignored).
4087
4088 @node Input Section
4089 @subsection Input Section Description
4090 @cindex input sections
4091 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4092 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4093
4094 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4095 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4096 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4097 map the input files into your memory layout.
4098
4099 @menu
4100 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4101 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4102 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4103 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4104 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4105 @end menu
4106
4107 @node Input Section Basics
4108 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4109 @cindex input section basics
4110 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4111 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4112
4113 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4114 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4115
4116 The most common input section description is to include all input
4117 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4118 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4119 @smallexample
4120 *(.text)
4121 @end smallexample
4122 @noindent
4123 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4124 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4125 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4126 example:
4127 @smallexample
4128 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4129 @end smallexample
4130 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4131 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4132
4133 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4134 @smallexample
4135 *(.text .rdata)
4136 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4137 @end smallexample
4138 @noindent
4139 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4140 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4141 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4142 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4143 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4144 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4145
4146 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4147 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4148 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4149 @smallexample
4150 data.o(.data)
4151 @end smallexample
4152
4153 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4154 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4155
4156 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4157
4158 @smallexample
4159 @group
4160 SECTIONS @{
4161 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4162 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4163 @}
4164 @end group
4165 @end smallexample
4166
4167 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4168 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4169 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4170 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4171 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4172
4173 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4174 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4175 with no whitespace around the colon.
4176
4177 @table @samp
4178 @item archive:file
4179 matches file within archive
4180 @item archive:
4181 matches the whole archive
4182 @item :file
4183 matches file but not one in an archive
4184 @end table
4185
4186 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4187 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4188 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4189 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4190 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4191 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4192 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4193 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4194 command.
4195
4196 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4197 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4198 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4199 @smallexample
4200 data.o
4201 @end smallexample
4202
4203 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4204 and does not contain any wild card
4205 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4206 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4207 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4208 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4209 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4210 the archive search path.
4211
4212 @node Input Section Wildcards
4213 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4214 @cindex input section wildcards
4215 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4216 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4217 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4218 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4219 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4220
4221 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4222 pattern for the file name.
4223
4224 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4225
4226 @table @samp
4227 @item *
4228 matches any number of characters
4229 @item ?
4230 matches any single character
4231 @item [@var{chars}]
4232 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4233 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4234 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4235 @item \
4236 quotes the following character
4237 @end table
4238
4239 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4240 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4241 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4242 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4243 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4244 a @samp{/} character.
4245
4246 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4247 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4248 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4249
4250 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4251 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4252 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4253 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4254 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4255 @smallexample
4256 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4257 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4258 @end smallexample
4259
4260 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4261 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4262 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4263 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4264 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4265 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4266 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4267
4268 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4269 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4270 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4271 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4272 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4273 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4274
4275 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4276 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4277 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4278 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4279 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4280
4281 @cindex SORT
4282 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4283
4284 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4285 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4286
4287 @enumerate
4288 @item
4289 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4290 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4291 sections have the same name.
4292 @item
4293 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4294 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4295 sections have the same alignment.
4296 @item
4297 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4298 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4299 @item
4300 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4301 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4302 @item
4303 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4304 @end enumerate
4305
4306 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4307 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4308 takes precedence over the command line option.
4309
4310 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4311 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4312 treated as nested sorting command.
4313
4314 @enumerate
4315 @item
4316 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4317 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4318 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4319 @item
4320 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4321 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4322 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4323 @end enumerate
4324
4325 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4326 command line option will be ignored.
4327
4328 @cindex SORT_NONE
4329 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4330 section sorting option.
4331
4332 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4333 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4334 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4335
4336 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4337 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4338 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4339 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4340 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4341 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4342 @smallexample
4343 @group
4344 SECTIONS @{
4345 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4346 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4347 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4348 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4349 @}
4350 @end group
4351 @end smallexample
4352
4353 @node Input Section Common
4354 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4355 @cindex common symbol placement
4356 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4357 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4358 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4359 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4360 named @samp{COMMON}.
4361
4362 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4363 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4364 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4365 input files are placed in another section.
4366
4367 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4368 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4369 @smallexample
4370 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4371 @end smallexample
4372
4373 @cindex scommon section
4374 @cindex small common symbols
4375 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4376 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4377 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4378 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4379 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4380 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4381 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4382 locations.
4383
4384 @cindex [COMMON]
4385 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4386 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4387 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4388
4389 @node Input Section Keep
4390 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4391 @cindex KEEP
4392 @cindex garbage collection
4393 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4394 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4395 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4396 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4397 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4398
4399 @node Input Section Example
4400 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4401 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4402 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4403 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4404 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4405 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4406 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4407 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4408 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4409 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4410
4411 @smallexample
4412 @group
4413 SECTIONS @{
4414 outputa 0x10000 :
4415 @{
4416 all.o
4417 foo.o (.input1)
4418 @}
4419 @end group
4420 @group
4421 outputb :
4422 @{
4423 foo.o (.input2)
4424 foo1.o (.input1)
4425 @}
4426 @end group
4427 @group
4428 outputc :
4429 @{
4430 *(.input1)
4431 *(.input2)
4432 @}
4433 @}
4434 @end group
4435 @end smallexample
4436
4437 @node Output Section Data
4438 @subsection Output Section Data
4439 @cindex data
4440 @cindex section data
4441 @cindex output section data
4442 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4443 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4444 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4445 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4446 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4447 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4448 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4449 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4450 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4451 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4452 counter.
4453
4454 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4455 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4456 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4457 stored.
4458
4459 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4460 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4461 @smallexample
4462 BYTE(1)
4463 LONG(addr)
4464 @end smallexample
4465
4466 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4467 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4468 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4469 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4470 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4471
4472 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4473 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4474 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4475 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4476 endianness of the first input object file.
4477
4478 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4479 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4480 @smallexample
4481 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4482 @end smallexample
4483 whereas this will work:
4484 @smallexample
4485 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4486 @end smallexample
4487
4488 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4489 @cindex holes, filling
4490 @cindex unspecified memory
4491 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4492 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4493 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4494 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4495 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4496 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4497 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4498 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4499 different parts of an output section.
4500
4501 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4502 value @samp{0x90}:
4503 @smallexample
4504 FILL(0x90909090)
4505 @end smallexample
4506
4507 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4508 section attribute, but it only affects the
4509 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4510 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4511 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4512 expression.
4513
4514 @node Output Section Keywords
4515 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4516 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4517 commands.
4518
4519 @table @code
4520 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4521 @cindex input filename symbols
4522 @cindex filename symbols
4523 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4524 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4525 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4526 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4527 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4528
4529 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4530 normally used for any other object file format.
4531
4532 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4533 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4534 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4535 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4536 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4537 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4538 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4539 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4540 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4541 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4542 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4543 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4544 ignored for other object file formats.
4545
4546 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4547 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4548 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4549 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4550 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4551 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4552 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4553 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4554 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4555 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4556 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4557 @code{exit}.
4558
4559 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4560 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4561 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4562 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4563 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4564 runtime code expects to see.
4565
4566 @smallexample
4567 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4568 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4569 *(.ctors)
4570 LONG(0)
4571 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4572 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4573 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4574 *(.dtors)
4575 LONG(0)
4576 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4577 @end smallexample
4578
4579 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4580 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4581 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4582 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4583 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4584 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4585 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4586 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4587
4588 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4589 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4590 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4591 scripts.
4592
4593 @end table
4594
4595 @node Output Section Discarding
4596 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4597 @cindex discarding sections
4598 @cindex sections, discarding
4599 @cindex removing sections
4600 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4601 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4602 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4603 @smallexample
4604 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4605 @end smallexample
4606 @noindent
4607 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4608 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4609 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4610 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4611 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4612 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4613 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4614 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4615 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4616
4617 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4618 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4619 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4620 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4621 section is discarded.
4622
4623 @cindex /DISCARD/
4624 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4625 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4626 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4627
4628 @node Output Section Attributes
4629 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4630 @cindex output section attributes
4631 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4632 like this:
4633
4634 @smallexample
4635 @group
4636 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4637 [AT(@var{lma})]
4638 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4639 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4640 [@var{constraint}]
4641 @{
4642 @var{output-section-command}
4643 @var{output-section-command}
4644 @dots{}
4645 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4646 @end group
4647 @end smallexample
4648
4649 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4650 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4651 remaining section attributes.
4652
4653 @menu
4654 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4655 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4656 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4657 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4658 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4659 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4660 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4661 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4662 @end menu
4663
4664 @node Output Section Type
4665 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4666 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4667 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4668
4669 @table @code
4670 @item NOLOAD
4671 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4672 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4673 @item DSECT
4674 @itemx COPY
4675 @itemx INFO
4676 @itemx OVERLAY
4677 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4678 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4679 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4680 section when the program is run.
4681 @end table
4682
4683 @kindex NOLOAD
4684 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4685 @cindex loading, preventing
4686 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4687 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4688 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4689 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4690 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4691 @smallexample
4692 @group
4693 SECTIONS @{
4694 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4695 @dots{}
4696 @}
4697 @end group
4698 @end smallexample
4699
4700 @node Output Section LMA
4701 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4702 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4703 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4704 @cindex load address
4705 @cindex section load address
4706 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4707 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4708 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4709 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4710 address is optional.
4711
4712 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4713 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4714 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4715 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4716 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4717
4718 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4719 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4720 load address:
4721
4722 @itemize @bullet
4723 @item
4724 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4725 the LMA address as well.
4726
4727 @item
4728 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4729
4730 @item
4731 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4732 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4733 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4734 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4735 the last section in the located region.
4736
4737 @item
4738 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4739 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4740
4741 @item
4742 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4743 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4744 @end itemize
4745
4746 @cindex ROM initialized data
4747 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4748 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4749 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4750 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4751 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4752 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4753 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4754 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4755 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4756
4757 @smallexample
4758 @group
4759 SECTIONS
4760 @{
4761 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4762 .mdata 0x2000 :
4763 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4764 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4765 .bss 0x3000 :
4766 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4767 @}
4768 @end group
4769 @end smallexample
4770
4771 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4772 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4773 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4774 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4775 script.
4776
4777 @smallexample
4778 @group
4779 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4780 char *src = &_etext;
4781 char *dst = &_data;
4782
4783 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4784 while (dst < &_edata)
4785 *dst++ = *src++;
4786
4787 /* Zero bss. */
4788 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4789 *dst = 0;
4790 @end group
4791 @end smallexample
4792
4793 @node Forced Output Alignment
4794 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4795 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4796 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4797 @cindex output section alignment
4798 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4799 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4800 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4801
4802 @node Forced Input Alignment
4803 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4804 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4805 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4806 @cindex input section alignment
4807 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4808 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4809 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4810
4811 @node Output Section Constraint
4812 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4813 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4814 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4815 @cindex constraints on output sections
4816 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4817 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4818 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4819 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4820
4821 @node Output Section Region
4822 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4823 @kindex >@var{region}
4824 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4825 @cindex memory regions and sections
4826 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4827 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4828
4829 Here is a simple example:
4830 @smallexample
4831 @group
4832 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4833 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4834 @end group
4835 @end smallexample
4836
4837 @node Output Section Phdr
4838 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4839 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4840 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4841 @cindex program headers and sections
4842 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4843 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4844 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4845 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4846 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4847 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4848
4849 Here is a simple example:
4850 @smallexample
4851 @group
4852 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4853 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4854 @end group
4855 @end smallexample
4856
4857 @node Output Section Fill
4858 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4859 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4860 @cindex section fill pattern
4861 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4862 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4863 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4864 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4865 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4866 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4867 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4868 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4869 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4870 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4871 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4872 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4873 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4874
4875 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4876 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4877
4878 Here is a simple example:
4879 @smallexample
4880 @group
4881 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4882 @end group
4883 @end smallexample
4884
4885 @node Overlay Description
4886 @subsection Overlay Description
4887 @kindex OVERLAY
4888 @cindex overlays
4889 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4890 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4891 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4892 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4893 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4894 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4895 than another.
4896
4897 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4898 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4899 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4900 command is as follows:
4901 @smallexample
4902 @group
4903 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4904 @{
4905 @var{secname1}
4906 @{
4907 @var{output-section-command}
4908 @var{output-section-command}
4909 @dots{}
4910 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4911 @var{secname2}
4912 @{
4913 @var{output-section-command}
4914 @var{output-section-command}
4915 @dots{}
4916 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4917 @dots{}
4918 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4919 @end group
4920 @end smallexample
4921
4922 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4923 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4924 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4925 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4926 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4927 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4928
4929 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4930 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4931
4932 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4933 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4934 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4935 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4936 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4937 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4938
4939 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4940 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4941 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4942 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4943 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4944
4945 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4946 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4947 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4948 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4949 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4950 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4951 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4952
4953 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4954 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4955
4956 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4957 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4958 @smallexample
4959 @group
4960 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4961 @{
4962 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4963 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4964 @}
4965 @end group
4966 @end smallexample
4967 @noindent
4968 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4969 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4970 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4971 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4972 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4973 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4974
4975 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4976 like the following.
4977
4978 @smallexample
4979 @group
4980 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4981 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4982 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4983 @end group
4984 @end smallexample
4985
4986 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4987 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4988 example could have been written identically as follows.
4989
4990 @smallexample
4991 @group
4992 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4993 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4994 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4995 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4996 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4997 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4998 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4999 @end group
5000 @end smallexample
5001
5002 @node MEMORY
5003 @section MEMORY Command
5004 @kindex MEMORY
5005 @cindex memory regions
5006 @cindex regions of memory
5007 @cindex allocating memory
5008 @cindex discontinuous memory
5009 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5010 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5011
5012 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5013 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5014 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5015 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5016 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5017 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5018 around to fit into the available regions.
5019
5020 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5021 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5022 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5023 @code{MEMORY} is:
5024 @smallexample
5025 @group
5026 MEMORY
5027 @{
5028 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5029 @dots{}
5030 @}
5031 @end group
5032 @end smallexample
5033
5034 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5035 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5036 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5037 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5038 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5039 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5040 command.
5041
5042 @cindex memory region attributes
5043 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5044 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5045 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5046 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5047 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5048 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5049 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5050
5051 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5052 @table @samp
5053 @item R
5054 Read-only section
5055 @item W
5056 Read/write section
5057 @item X
5058 Executable section
5059 @item A
5060 Allocatable section
5061 @item I
5062 Initialized section
5063 @item L
5064 Same as @samp{I}
5065 @item !
5066 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5067 @end table
5068
5069 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5070 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5071 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5072 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5073 attributes.
5074
5075 @kindex ORIGIN =
5076 @kindex o =
5077 @kindex org =
5078 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5079 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5080 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5081 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5082 @code{ORG}).
5083
5084 @kindex LENGTH =
5085 @kindex len =
5086 @kindex l =
5087 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5088 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5089 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5090 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5091
5092 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5093 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5094 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5095 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5096 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5097 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5098 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5099 region.
5100
5101 @smallexample
5102 @group
5103 MEMORY
5104 @{
5105 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5106 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5107 @}
5108 @end group
5109 @end smallexample
5110
5111 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5112 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5113 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5114 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5115 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5116 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5117 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5118 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5119 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5120
5121 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5122 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5123 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5124
5125 @smallexample
5126 @group
5127 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5128 @end group
5129 @end smallexample
5130
5131 @node PHDRS
5132 @section PHDRS Command
5133 @kindex PHDRS
5134 @cindex program headers
5135 @cindex ELF program headers
5136 @cindex program segments
5137 @cindex segments, ELF
5138 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5139 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5140 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5141 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5142
5143 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5144 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5145 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5146 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5147 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5148
5149 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5150 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5151 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5152 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5153 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5154
5155 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5156 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5157 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5158
5159 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5160 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5161
5162 @smallexample
5163 @group
5164 PHDRS
5165 @{
5166 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5167 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5168 @}
5169 @end group
5170 @end smallexample
5171
5172 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5173 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5174 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5175 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5176 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5177 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5178
5179 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5180 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5181 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5182 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5183 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5184 Section Phdr}.
5185
5186 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5187 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5188 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5189 contain the section.
5190
5191 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5192 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5193 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5194 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5195 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5196 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5197 segment at all.
5198
5199 @kindex FILEHDR
5200 @kindex PHDRS
5201 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5202 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5203 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5204 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5205 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5206 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5207 these keywords.
5208
5209 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5210 value of the keyword.
5211
5212 @table @asis
5213 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5214 Indicates an unused program header.
5215
5216 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5217 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5218 the file.
5219
5220 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5221 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5222
5223 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5224 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5225 found.
5226
5227 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5228 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5229
5230 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5231 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5232 ABI.
5233
5234 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5235 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5236
5237 @item @var{expression}
5238 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5239 be used for types not defined above.
5240 @end table
5241
5242 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5243 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5244 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5245 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5246 output section attribute.
5247
5248 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5249 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5250 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5251 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5252 header.
5253
5254 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5255 headers used on a native ELF system.
5256
5257 @example
5258 @group
5259 PHDRS
5260 @{
5261 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5262 interp PT_INTERP ;
5263 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5264 data PT_LOAD ;
5265 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5266 @}
5267
5268 SECTIONS
5269 @{
5270 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5271 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5272 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5273 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5274 @dots{}
5275 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5276 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5277 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5278 @dots{}
5279 @}
5280 @end group
5281 @end example
5282
5283 @node VERSION
5284 @section VERSION Command
5285 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5286 @cindex symbol versions
5287 @cindex version script
5288 @cindex versions of symbols
5289 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5290 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5291 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5292 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5293 shared library.
5294
5295 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5296 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5297 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5298
5299 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5300 @smallexample
5301 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5302 @end smallexample
5303
5304 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5305 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5306 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5307 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5308 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5309 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5310 library.
5311
5312 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5313 examples.
5314
5315 @smallexample
5316 VERS_1.1 @{
5317 global:
5318 foo1;
5319 local:
5320 old*;
5321 original*;
5322 new*;
5323 @};
5324
5325 VERS_1.2 @{
5326 foo2;
5327 @} VERS_1.1;
5328
5329 VERS_2.0 @{
5330 bar1; bar2;
5331 extern "C++" @{
5332 ns::*;
5333 "f(int, double)";
5334 @};
5335 @} VERS_1.2;
5336 @end smallexample
5337
5338 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5339 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5340 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5341 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5342 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5343 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5344 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5345 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5346 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5347 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5348
5349 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5350 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5351 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5352
5353 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5354 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5355 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5356
5357 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5358 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5359 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5360 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5361 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5362 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5363 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5364 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5365 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5366
5367 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5368 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5369 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5370 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5371
5372 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5373 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5374 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5375 won't.
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5379 @end smallexample
5380
5381 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5382 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5383 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5384 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5385 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5386 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5387 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5388 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5389 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5390 search for each symbol reference.
5391
5392 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5393 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5394 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5395 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5396 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5397 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5398 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5399 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5400 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5401
5402 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5403 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5404 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5405 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5406 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5407 @smallexample
5408 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5409 @end smallexample
5410 @noindent
5411 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5412 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5413 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5414 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5415 takes precedence over a version script.
5416
5417 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5418 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5419 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5420 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5421 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5422
5423 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5424 source file. Here is an example:
5425
5426 @smallexample
5427 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5428 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5429 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5430 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5431 @end smallexample
5432
5433 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5434 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5435 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5436 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5437
5438 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5439 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5440 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5441 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5442 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5443 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5444
5445 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5446 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5447 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5448 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5449
5450 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5451
5452 @smallexample
5453 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5454 @end smallexample
5455
5456 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5457 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5458 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5459 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5460 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5461
5462 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5463 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5464 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5465 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5466 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5467 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5468 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5469 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5470 expect when you upgrade.
5471
5472 @node Expressions
5473 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5474 @cindex expressions
5475 @cindex arithmetic
5476 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5477 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5478 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5479 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5480
5481 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5482
5483 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5484 expressions.
5485
5486 @menu
5487 * Constants:: Constants
5488 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5489 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5490 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5491 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5492 * Operators:: Operators
5493 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5494 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5495 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5496 @end menu
5497
5498 @node Constants
5499 @subsection Constants
5500 @cindex integer notation
5501 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5502 All constants are integers.
5503
5504 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5505 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5506 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5507 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5508 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5509 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5510
5511 @cindex scaled integers
5512 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5513 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5514 @cindex suffixes for integers
5515 @cindex integer suffixes
5516 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5517 constant by
5518 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5519 @ifnottex
5520 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5521 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5522 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5523 @end ifnottex
5524 @tex
5525 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5526 @end tex
5527 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5528 respectively. For example, the following
5529 all refer to the same quantity:
5530
5531 @smallexample
5532 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5533 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5534 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5535 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5536 @end smallexample
5537
5538 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5539 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5540
5541 @node Symbolic Constants
5542 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5543 @cindex symbolic constants
5544 @kindex CONSTANT
5545 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5546 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5547
5548 @table @code
5549 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5550 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5551 The target's maximum page size.
5552
5553 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5554 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5555 The target's default page size.
5556 @end table
5557
5558 So for example:
5559
5560 @smallexample
5561 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5562 @end smallexample
5563
5564 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5565 supported by the target.
5566
5567 @node Symbols
5568 @subsection Symbol Names
5569 @cindex symbol names
5570 @cindex names
5571 @cindex quoted symbol names
5572 @kindex "
5573 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5574 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5575 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5576 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5577 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5578 @smallexample
5579 "SECTION" = 9;
5580 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5581 @end smallexample
5582
5583 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5584 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5585 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5586
5587 @node Orphan Sections
5588 @subsection Orphan Sections
5589 @cindex orphan
5590 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5591 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5592 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5593 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5594 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5595 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5596 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5597 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5598 at the end of the file.
5599
5600 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5601 well as section flag.
5602
5603 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5604 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5605 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5606
5607 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5608 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5609 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5610 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5611 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5612 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5613 character.
5614
5615 @node Location Counter
5616 @subsection The Location Counter
5617 @kindex .
5618 @cindex dot
5619 @cindex location counter
5620 @cindex current output location
5621 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5622 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5623 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5624 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5625 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5626
5627 @cindex holes
5628 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5629 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5630 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5631 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5632 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5633
5634 @smallexample
5635 SECTIONS
5636 @{
5637 output :
5638 @{
5639 file1(.text)
5640 . = . + 1000;
5641 file2(.text)
5642 . += 1000;
5643 file3(.text)
5644 @} = 0x12345678;
5645 @}
5646 @end smallexample
5647 @noindent
5648 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5649 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5650 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5651 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5652 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5653 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5654
5655 @cindex dot inside sections
5656 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5657 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5658 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5659 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5660 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5661 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5662
5663 @smallexample
5664 SECTIONS
5665 @{
5666 . = 0x100
5667 .text: @{
5668 *(.text)
5669 . = 0x200
5670 @}
5671 . = 0x500
5672 .data: @{
5673 *(.data)
5674 . += 0x600
5675 @}
5676 @}
5677 @end smallexample
5678
5679 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5680 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5681 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5682 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5683 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5684 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5685 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5686 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5687
5688 @cindex dot outside sections
5689 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5690 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5691 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5692
5693 @smallexample
5694 SECTIONS
5695 @{
5696 start_of_text = . ;
5697 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5698 end_of_text = . ;
5699
5700 start_of_data = . ;
5701 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5702 end_of_data = . ;
5703 @}
5704 @end smallexample
5705
5706 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5707 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5708 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5709 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5710 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5711 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5712 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5713 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5714 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5715 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5716 as follows:
5717
5718 @smallexample
5719 SECTIONS
5720 @{
5721 start_of_text = . ;
5722 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5723 end_of_text = . ;
5724
5725 start_of_data = . ;
5726 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5727 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5728 end_of_data = . ;
5729 @}
5730 @end smallexample
5731
5732 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5733 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5734 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5735 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5736 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5737 section. So you could write:
5738
5739 @smallexample
5740 SECTIONS
5741 @{
5742 start_of_text = . ;
5743 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5744 end_of_text = . ;
5745
5746 . = . ;
5747 start_of_data = . ;
5748 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5749 end_of_data = . ;
5750 @}
5751 @end smallexample
5752
5753 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5754 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5755
5756 @need 2000
5757 @node Operators
5758 @subsection Operators
5759 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5760 @cindex arithmetic operators
5761 @cindex precedence in expressions
5762 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5763 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5764 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5765 @ifnottex
5766 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5767 @smallexample
5768 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5769 (highest)
5770 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5771 2 left * / %
5772 3 left + -
5773 4 left >> <<
5774 5 left == != > < <= >=
5775 6 left &
5776 7 left |
5777 8 left &&
5778 9 left ||
5779 10 right ? :
5780 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5781 (lowest)
5782 @end smallexample
5783 Notes:
5784 (1) Prefix operators
5785 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5786 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5787 @end ifnottex
5788 @tex
5789 \vskip \baselineskip
5790 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5791 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5792 \hrule
5793 \halign
5794 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5795 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5796 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5797 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5798 \noalign{\hrule}
5799 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5800 &highest&&&&&\cr
5801 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5802 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5803 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5804 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5805 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5806 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5807 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5808 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5809 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5810 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5811 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5812 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5813 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5814 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5815 \hrule}
5816 @end tex
5817 @iftex
5818 {
5819 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5820 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5821 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5822 }
5823 @end iftex
5824 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5825
5826 @node Evaluation
5827 @subsection Evaluation
5828 @cindex lazy evaluation
5829 @cindex expression evaluation order
5830 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5831 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5832
5833 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5834 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5835 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5836 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5837
5838 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5839 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5840 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5841 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5842
5843 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5844 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5845 allocation.
5846
5847 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5848 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5849
5850 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5851 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5852 following
5853 @smallexample
5854 @group
5855 SECTIONS
5856 @{
5857 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5858 @{ *(.text) @}
5859 @}
5860 @end group
5861 @end smallexample
5862 @noindent
5863 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5864 address}.
5865
5866 @node Expression Section
5867 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5868 @cindex expression sections
5869 @cindex absolute expressions
5870 @cindex relative expressions
5871 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5872 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5873 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5874 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5875 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5876 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5877 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5878 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5879 operations.
5880
5881 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5882 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5883 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5884 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5885 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5886 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5887 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5888 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5889 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5890 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5891 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5892 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5893 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5894 everywhere.
5895
5896 In the following simple example,
5897
5898 @smallexample
5899 @group
5900 SECTIONS
5901 @{
5902 . = 0x100;
5903 __executable_start = 0x100;
5904 .data :
5905 @{
5906 . = 0x10;
5907 __data_start = 0x10;
5908 *(.data)
5909 @}
5910 @dots{}
5911 @}
5912 @end group
5913 @end smallexample
5914
5915 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5916 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5917 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5918 section in the second two assignments.
5919
5920 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5921 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5922
5923 @itemize @bullet
5924 @item
5925 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5926 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5927 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5928 @item
5929 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5930 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5931 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5932 @item
5933 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5934 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5935 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5936 before applying the operator.
5937 @end itemize
5938
5939 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5940
5941 @itemize @bullet
5942 @item
5943 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5944 @item
5945 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5946 @item
5947 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5948 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5949 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5950 @item
5951 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5952 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5953 section as the relative operand(s).
5954 @item
5955 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5956 conversions) is an absolute address.
5957 @end itemize
5958
5959 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5960 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5961 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5962 section @samp{.data}:
5963 @smallexample
5964 SECTIONS
5965 @{
5966 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5967 @}
5968 @end smallexample
5969 @noindent
5970 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5971 @samp{.data} section.
5972
5973 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5974 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5975
5976 @node Builtin Functions
5977 @subsection Builtin Functions
5978 @cindex functions in expressions
5979 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5980 use in linker script expressions.
5981
5982 @table @code
5983 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5984 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5985 @cindex expression, absolute
5986 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5987 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5988 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5989 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5990
5991 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5992 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5993 @cindex section address in expression
5994 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5995 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5996 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5997 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5998 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5999 the other two will be absolute:
6000 @smallexample
6001 @group
6002 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6003 .output1 :
6004 @{
6005 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6006 @dots{}
6007 @}
6008 .output :
6009 @{
6010 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6011 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6012 @}
6013 @dots{} @}
6014 @end group
6015 @end smallexample
6016
6017 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6018 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6019 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6020 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6021 @cindex round up location counter
6022 @cindex align location counter
6023 @cindex round up expression
6024 @cindex align expression
6025 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6026 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6027 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6028 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6029 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6030 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6031
6032 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6033 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6034 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6035 input sections:
6036 @smallexample
6037 @group
6038 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6039 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6040 *(.data)
6041 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6042 @}
6043 @dots{} @}
6044 @end group
6045 @end smallexample
6046 @noindent
6047 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6048 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6049 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6050 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6051
6052 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6053
6054 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6055 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6056 @cindex section alignment
6057 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6058 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6059 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6060 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6061 value in that section.
6062 @smallexample
6063 @group
6064 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6065 .output @{
6066 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6067 @dots{}
6068 @}
6069 @dots{} @}
6070 @end group
6071 @end smallexample
6072
6073 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6074 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6075 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6076 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6077 section.
6078
6079 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6080 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6081 This is equivalent to either
6082 @smallexample
6083 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6084 @end smallexample
6085 or
6086 @smallexample
6087 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6088 @end smallexample
6089 @noindent
6090 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6091 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6092 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6093 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6094 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6095 bytes in the on-disk file.
6096
6097 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6098 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6099 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6100 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6101 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6102
6103 @noindent
6104 Example:
6105 @smallexample
6106 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6107 @end smallexample
6108
6109 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6110 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6111 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6112 evaluation purposes.
6113
6114 @smallexample
6115 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6116 @end smallexample
6117
6118 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6119 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6120 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6121 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6122 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6123 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6124 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6125 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6126 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6127 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6128 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6129 section alignment.
6130
6131 @smallexample
6132 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6133 @end smallexample
6134
6135 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6136 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6137 @cindex symbol defaults
6138 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6139 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6140 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6141 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6142 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6143 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6144 existed, its value is preserved:
6145
6146 @smallexample
6147 @group
6148 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6149 .text : @{
6150 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6151 @dots{}
6152 @}
6153 @dots{}
6154 @}
6155 @end group
6156 @end smallexample
6157
6158 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6159 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6160 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6161
6162 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6163 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6164 @cindex section load address in expression
6165 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6166 Section LMA}).
6167
6168 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6169 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6170 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6171 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6172
6173 @kindex MAX
6174 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6175 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6176
6177 @kindex MIN
6178 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6179 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6180
6181 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6182 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6183 @cindex unallocated address, next
6184 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6185 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6186 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6187 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6188
6189 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6190 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6191 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6192
6193 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6194 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6195 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6196 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6197 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6198 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6199 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6200 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6201 name.
6202
6203 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6204 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6205 @cindex section size
6206 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6207 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6208 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6209 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6210 @smallexample
6211 @group
6212 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6213 .output @{
6214 .start = . ;
6215 @dots{}
6216 .end = . ;
6217 @}
6218 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6219 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6220 @dots{} @}
6221 @end group
6222 @end smallexample
6223
6224 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6225 @itemx sizeof_headers
6226 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6227 @cindex header size
6228 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6229 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6230 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6231 choose, to facilitate paging.
6232
6233 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6234 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6235 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6236 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6237 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6238 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6239 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6240 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6241 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6242 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6243 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6244 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6245 @end table
6246
6247 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6248 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6249 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6250 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6251 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6252 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6253 linker will report an error.
6254
6255 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6256
6257 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6258 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6259 commands.
6260
6261 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6262 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6263 read. This can affect archive searching.
6264
6265 @ifset GENERIC
6266 @node Machine Dependent
6267 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6268
6269 @cindex machine dependencies
6270 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6271 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6272 functionality are not listed.
6273
6274 @menu
6275 @ifset H8300
6276 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6277 @end ifset
6278 @ifset I960
6279 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6280 @end ifset
6281 @ifset M68HC11
6282 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6283 @end ifset
6284 @ifset ARM
6285 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6286 @end ifset
6287 @ifset HPPA
6288 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6289 @end ifset
6290 @ifset M68K
6291 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6292 @end ifset
6293 @ifset MIPS
6294 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6295 @end ifset
6296 @ifset MMIX
6297 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6298 @end ifset
6299 @ifset MSP430
6300 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6301 @end ifset
6302 @ifset NDS32
6303 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6304 @end ifset
6305 @ifset NIOSII
6306 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6307 @end ifset
6308 @ifset POWERPC
6309 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6310 @end ifset
6311 @ifset POWERPC64
6312 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6313 @end ifset
6314 @ifset SPU
6315 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6316 @end ifset
6317 @ifset TICOFF
6318 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6319 @end ifset
6320 @ifset WIN32
6321 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6322 @end ifset
6323 @ifset XTENSA
6324 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6325 @end ifset
6326 @end menu
6327 @end ifset
6328
6329 @ifset H8300
6330 @ifclear GENERIC
6331 @raisesections
6332 @end ifclear
6333
6334 @node H8/300
6335 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6336
6337 @cindex H8/300 support
6338 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6339 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6340
6341 @table @emph
6342 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6343 @item relaxing address modes
6344 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6345 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6346 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6347 respectively.
6348
6349 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6350 @item synthesizing instructions
6351 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6352 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6353 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6354 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6355 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6356 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6357 top page of memory).
6358
6359 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6360 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6361 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6362 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6363 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6364 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6365 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6366
6367 @item bit manipulation instructions
6368 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6369 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6370 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6371 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6372 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6373 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6374 the top page of memory).
6375
6376 @item system control instructions
6377 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6378 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6379 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6380 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6381 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6382 the top page of memory).
6383 @end table
6384
6385 @ifclear GENERIC
6386 @lowersections
6387 @end ifclear
6388 @end ifset
6389
6390 @ifclear GENERIC
6391 @ifset Renesas
6392 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6393 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6394 @node Renesas
6395 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6396
6397 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6398 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6399 options are required for these chips.
6400 @end ifset
6401 @end ifclear
6402
6403 @ifset I960
6404 @ifclear GENERIC
6405 @raisesections
6406 @end ifclear
6407
6408 @node i960
6409 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6410
6411 @cindex i960 support
6412
6413 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6414 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6415 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6416 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6417 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6418 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6419 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6420
6421 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6422 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6423 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6424 the names
6425
6426 @smallexample
6427 @group
6428 try
6429 libtry.a
6430 tryca
6431 libtryca.a
6432 @end group
6433 @end smallexample
6434
6435 @noindent
6436 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6437 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6438
6439 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6440 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6441 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6442 specifies a library.
6443
6444 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6445 @cindex relaxing on i960
6446 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6447 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6448 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6449 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6450 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6451 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6452 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6453 not itself call any subroutines).
6454
6455 @ifclear GENERIC
6456 @lowersections
6457 @end ifclear
6458 @end ifset
6459
6460 @ifset ARM
6461 @ifclear GENERIC
6462 @raisesections
6463 @end ifclear
6464
6465 @ifset M68HC11
6466 @ifclear GENERIC
6467 @raisesections
6468 @end ifclear
6469
6470 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6471 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6472
6473 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6474
6475 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6476
6477 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6478 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6479
6480 @table @emph
6481 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6482 @item relaxing address modes
6483 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6484 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6485 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6486 respectively.
6487
6488 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6489 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6490 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6491
6492 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6493 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6494 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6495 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6496 @code{bset} instructions.
6497
6498 @end table
6499
6500 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6501
6502 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6503 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6504 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6505 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6506 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6507 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6508 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6509 point to the function trampoline.
6510
6511 @ifclear GENERIC
6512 @lowersections
6513 @end ifclear
6514 @end ifset
6515
6516 @node ARM
6517 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6518
6519 @cindex ARM interworking support
6520 @kindex --support-old-code
6521 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6522 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6523 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6524 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6525 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6526 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6527 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6528 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6529 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6530 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6531
6532 @cindex thumb entry point
6533 @cindex entry point, thumb
6534 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6535 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6536 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6537 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6538 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6539 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6540
6541 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6542 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6543 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6544 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6545 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6546 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6547
6548 @cindex BE8
6549 @kindex --be8
6550 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6551 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6552 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6553 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6554 little-endian code.
6555
6556 @cindex TARGET1
6557 @kindex --target1-rel
6558 @kindex --target1-abs
6559 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6560 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6561 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6562 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6563
6564 @cindex TARGET2
6565 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6566 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6567 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6568 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6569 @table @samp
6570 @item rel
6571 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6572 @item abs
6573 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6574 @item got-rel
6575 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6576 @end table
6577
6578 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6579 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6580 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6581 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6582 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6583 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6584
6585 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6586 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6587 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6588
6589 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6590 relocations are ignored.
6591
6592 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6593 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6594 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6595 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6596
6597 @smallexample
6598 TST rM, #1
6599 MOVEQ PC, rM
6600 BX Rn
6601 @end smallexample
6602
6603 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6604 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6605 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6606
6607 @cindex USE_BLX
6608 @kindex --use-blx
6609 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6610 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6611 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6612 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6613 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6614
6615 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6616 specify it if you are using that target.
6617
6618 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6619 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6620 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6621 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6622 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6623 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6624 the support code can read the intended values.
6625
6626 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6627 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6628 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6629 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6630 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6631 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6632
6633 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6634 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6635 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6636 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6637 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6638 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6639
6640 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6641 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6642 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6643 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6644 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6645 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6646 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6647
6648 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6649 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6650 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6651 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6652 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6653 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6654 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6655
6656 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6657 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6658 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6659
6660 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6661 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6662 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6663 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6664 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6665 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6666 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6667 not be diagnosed.
6668
6669 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6670 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6671 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6672 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6673 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6674 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6675 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6676
6677 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6678 @kindex --pic-veneer
6679 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6680 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6681 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6682 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6683
6684 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6685 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6686 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6687 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6688 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6689 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6690 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6691 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6692 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6693 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6694 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6695 where they should be placed.
6696
6697 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6698 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6699 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6700 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6701 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6702 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6703 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6704 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6705 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6706 from the input sections.
6707
6708 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6709 @samp{N = +1}.
6710
6711 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6712 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6713 otherwise.
6714
6715 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6716 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6717 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6718 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6719
6720 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6721
6722 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6723 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6724 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6725 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6726
6727 Please contact ARM for further details.
6728
6729 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6730 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6731 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6732 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6733
6734 @kindex --long-plt
6735 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6736 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6737 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6738 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6739
6740 @ifclear GENERIC
6741 @lowersections
6742 @end ifclear
6743 @end ifset
6744
6745 @ifset HPPA
6746 @ifclear GENERIC
6747 @raisesections
6748 @end ifclear
6749
6750 @node HPPA ELF32
6751 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6752 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6753 @kindex --multi-subspace
6754 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6755 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6756 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6757 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6758 multiple sub-spaces.
6759
6760 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6761 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6762 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6763 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6764 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6765 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6766 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6767 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6768 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6769 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6770 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6771 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6772 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6773 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6774 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6775 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6776
6777 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6778 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6779 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6780 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6781
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @lowersections
6784 @end ifclear
6785 @end ifset
6786
6787 @ifset M68K
6788 @ifclear GENERIC
6789 @raisesections
6790 @end ifclear
6791
6792 @node M68K
6793 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6794
6795 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6796 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6797 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6798 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6799 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6800 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6801 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6802 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6803 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6804 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6805 support such GOTs.
6806 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6807 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6808 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6809 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6810
6811 @ifclear GENERIC
6812 @lowersections
6813 @end ifclear
6814 @end ifset
6815
6816 @ifset MIPS
6817 @ifclear GENERIC
6818 @raisesections
6819 @end ifclear
6820
6821 @node MIPS
6822 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6823
6824 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6825 @kindex --insn32
6826 @kindex --no-insn32
6827 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6828 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6829 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6830 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6831 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6832 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6833
6834 @ifclear GENERIC
6835 @lowersections
6836 @end ifclear
6837 @end ifset
6838
6839 @ifset MMIX
6840 @ifclear GENERIC
6841 @raisesections
6842 @end ifclear
6843
6844 @node MMIX
6845 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6846 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6847 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6848 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6849 can translate between the two formats.
6850
6851 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6852 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6853 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6854 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6855 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6856 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6857 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6858 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6859
6860 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6861 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6862 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6863 of a section.
6864
6865 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6866 are left out from an mmo file.
6867
6868 @ifclear GENERIC
6869 @lowersections
6870 @end ifclear
6871 @end ifset
6872
6873 @ifset MSP430
6874 @ifclear GENERIC
6875 @raisesections
6876 @end ifclear
6877
6878 @node MSP430
6879 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6880 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6881 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6882 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6883
6884 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6885 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6886
6887 @table @code
6888 @item @samp{.vectors}
6889 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6890
6891 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6892 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6893 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6894
6895 @item @samp{.infomem}
6896 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6897 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6898
6899 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6900 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6901 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6902
6903 @item @samp{.noinit}
6904 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6905
6906 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6907 @end table
6908
6909 @ifclear GENERIC
6910 @lowersections
6911 @end ifclear
6912 @end ifset
6913
6914 @ifset NDS32
6915 @ifclear GENERIC
6916 @raisesections
6917 @end ifclear
6918
6919 @node NDS32
6920 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6921 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6922 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6923 relaxes objects according to these options.
6924
6925 @table @code
6926 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6927 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6928
6929 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6930 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6931
6932 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6933 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6934
6935 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6936 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6937
6938 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6939 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6940
6941 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6942 Update the existing EX9 table.
6943
6944 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6945 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6946
6947 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6948 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6949
6950 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6951 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6952
6953 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6954 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6955 @end table
6956
6957 @ifclear GENERIC
6958 @lowersections
6959 @end ifclear
6960 @end ifset
6961
6962 @ifset NIOSII
6963 @ifclear GENERIC
6964 @raisesections
6965 @end ifclear
6966
6967 @node Nios II
6968 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6969 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6970 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6971
6972 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6973 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6974 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6975 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6976 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6977 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6978 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6979 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6980 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6981 larger than 256MB.
6982
6983 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6984 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6985 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6986 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6987 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6988 register as a temporary.
6989
6990 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6991 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6992 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6993
6994 @ifclear GENERIC
6995 @lowersections
6996 @end ifclear
6997 @end ifset
6998
6999 @ifset POWERPC
7000 @ifclear GENERIC
7001 @raisesections
7002 @end ifclear
7003
7004 @node PowerPC ELF32
7005 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7006 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7007 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7008 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7009 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7010 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7011 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7012 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7013 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7014 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7015 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7016 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7017 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7018
7019 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7020 @table @option
7021 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7022 @kindex --bss-plt
7023 @item --bss-plt
7024 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7025 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7026 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7027 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7028 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7029 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7030 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7031 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7032
7033 @kindex --secure-plt
7034 @item --secure-plt
7035 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7036 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7037 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7038 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7039 style BSS PLT.
7040
7041 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7042 @kindex --sdata-got
7043 @item --sdata-got
7044 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7045 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7046 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7047 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7048 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7049 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7050 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7051 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7052 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7053 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7054 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7055 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7056
7057 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7058 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7059 @item --emit-stub-syms
7060 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7061 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7062
7063 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7064 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7065 @item --no-tls-optimize
7066 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7067 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7068 disable the optimization.
7069 @end table
7070
7071 @ifclear GENERIC
7072 @lowersections
7073 @end ifclear
7074 @end ifset
7075
7076 @ifset POWERPC64
7077 @ifclear GENERIC
7078 @raisesections
7079 @end ifclear
7080
7081 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7082 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7083
7084 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7085 @table @option
7086 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7087 @kindex --stub-group-size
7088 @item --stub-group-size
7089 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7090 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7091 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7092 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7093 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7094 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7095 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7096 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7097 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7098 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7099 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7100 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7101 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7102 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7103
7104 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7105 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7106 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7107 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7108
7109 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7110 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7111 @item --emit-stub-syms
7112 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7113 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7114
7115 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7116 @kindex --dotsyms
7117 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7118 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7119 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7120 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7121 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7122 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7123 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7124 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7125 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7126 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7127 feature.
7128
7129 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7130 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7131 @item --no-tls-optimize
7132 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7133 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7134 disable the optimization.
7135
7136 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7137 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7138 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7139 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize, --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7140 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7141 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7142 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7143 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7144 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7145 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7146 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7147 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7148 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7149 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7150
7151 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7152 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7153 @item --no-opd-optimize
7154 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7155 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7156 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7157 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7158
7159 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7160 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7161 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7162 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7163 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7164 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7165 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7166
7167 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7168 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7169 @item --no-toc-optimize
7170 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7171 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7172 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7173 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7174 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7175 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7176 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7177 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7178 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7179 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7180 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7181 optimization.
7182
7183 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7184 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7185 @item --no-multi-toc
7186 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7187 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7188 where TOC
7189 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7190 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7191 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7192 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7193 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7194 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7195 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7196 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7197
7198 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7199 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7200 @item --no-toc-sort
7201 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7202 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7203 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7204 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7205 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7206 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7207 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7208 off this feature.
7209
7210 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7211 @kindex --plt-align
7212 @kindex --no-plt-align
7213 @item --plt-align
7214 @itemx --no-plt-align
7215 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7216 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7217 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7218 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7219 stubs are packed tightly.
7220
7221 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7222 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7223 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7224 @item --plt-static-chain
7225 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7226 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7227 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7228 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7229
7230 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7231 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7232 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7233 @item --plt-thread-safe
7234 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7235 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7236 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7237 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7238 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7239 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7240 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7241 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7242 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7243 default behaviour.
7244 @end table
7245
7246 @ifclear GENERIC
7247 @lowersections
7248 @end ifclear
7249 @end ifset
7250
7251 @ifset SPU
7252 @ifclear GENERIC
7253 @raisesections
7254 @end ifclear
7255
7256 @node SPU ELF
7257 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7258
7259 @cindex SPU ELF options
7260 @table @option
7261
7262 @cindex SPU plugins
7263 @kindex --plugin
7264 @item --plugin
7265 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7266
7267 @cindex SPU overlays
7268 @kindex --no-overlays
7269 @item --no-overlays
7270 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7271 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7272 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7273 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7274
7275 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7276 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7277 @item --emit-stub-syms
7278 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7279 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7280
7281 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7282 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7283 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7284 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7285 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7286 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7287
7288 @cindex SPU local store size
7289 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7290 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7291 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7292 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7293 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7294
7295 @cindex SPU
7296 @kindex --stack-analysis
7297 @item --stack-analysis
7298 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7299 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7300 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7301 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7302 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7303 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7304 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7305 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7306 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7307 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7308 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7309 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7310 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7311 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7312 and calls will be given.
7313
7314 @cindex SPU
7315 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7316 @item --emit-stack-syms
7317 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7318 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7319 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7320 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7321 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7322 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7323 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7324 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7325 @end table
7326
7327 @ifclear GENERIC
7328 @lowersections
7329 @end ifclear
7330 @end ifset
7331
7332 @ifset TICOFF
7333 @ifclear GENERIC
7334 @raisesections
7335 @end ifclear
7336
7337 @node TI COFF
7338 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7339 @cindex TI COFF versions
7340 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7341 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7342 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7343 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7344 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7345 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7346
7347 @ifclear GENERIC
7348 @lowersections
7349 @end ifclear
7350 @end ifset
7351
7352 @ifset WIN32
7353 @ifclear GENERIC
7354 @raisesections
7355 @end ifclear
7356
7357 @node WIN32
7358 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7359
7360 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7361 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7362 command line options mentioned here.
7363
7364 @table @emph
7365 @cindex import libraries
7366 @item import libraries
7367 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7368 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7369 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7370 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7371 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7372 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7373
7374 @item exporting DLL symbols
7375 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7376 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7377
7378 @table @emph
7379 @item using auto-export functionality
7380 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7381 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7382 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7383
7384 @itemize
7385 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7386 @item --exclude-symbols
7387 @item --exclude-libs
7388 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7389 @item --version-script
7390 @end itemize
7391
7392 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7393 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7394 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7395 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7396 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7397 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7398 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7399 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7400
7401 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7402 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7403 if either of the following are true:
7404
7405 @itemize
7406 @item A DEF file is used.
7407 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7408 @end itemize
7409
7410 @item using a DEF file
7411 @cindex using a DEF file
7412 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7413 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7414 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7415 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7416 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7417
7418 @example
7419 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7420 @end example
7421
7422 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7423 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7424
7425 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7426
7427 @example
7428 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7429
7430 EXPORTS
7431 foo
7432 bar
7433 _bar = bar
7434 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7435 var1 DATA
7436 doo = foo == foo2
7437 eoo DATA == var1
7438 @end example
7439
7440 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7441 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7442 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7443 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7444 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7445 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7446 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7447 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7448 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7449
7450 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7451 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7452 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7453
7454 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7455 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7456 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7457 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7458
7459 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7460 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7461 non-default base address for the image.
7462
7463 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7464 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7465 filename specified on the command line.
7466
7467 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7468
7469 @example
7470 EXPORTS
7471 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7472 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7473 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7474 @end example
7475
7476 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7477 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7478 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7479 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7480 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7481 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7482 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7483
7484 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7485
7486 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7487 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7488 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7489 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7490 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7491
7492 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7493 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7494 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7495 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7496
7497 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7498 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7499 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7500 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7501 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7502 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7503 application will behave unexpectedly.
7504
7505 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7506 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7507 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7508 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7509 the DLL without an import library.
7510
7511 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7512 other DEF file statements
7513
7514 @cindex creating a DEF file
7515 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7516 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7517
7518 @item Using decorations
7519 @cindex Using decorations
7520 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7521 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7522 declared as:
7523
7524 @example
7525 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7526 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7527 @end example
7528
7529 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7530 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7531 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7532 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7533
7534 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7535 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7536 instead:
7537
7538 @example
7539 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7540 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7541 @end example
7542
7543 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7544 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7545 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7546 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7547 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7548 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7549 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7550 information.
7551 @end table
7552
7553 @cindex automatic data imports
7554 @item automatic data imports
7555 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7556 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7557 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7558 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7559 code to these platforms, especially for large
7560 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7561 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7562 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7563 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7564 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7565 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7566 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7567 trigger the feature's use.
7568
7569 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7570 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7571
7572 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7573 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7574
7575 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7576 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7577 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7578 below.
7579
7580 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7581 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7582 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7583 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7584 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7585 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7586 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7587 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7588 references.
7589
7590 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7591 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7592 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7593 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7594 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7595 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7596 run without error on an older system.
7597
7598 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7599 enabled as needed.
7600
7601 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7602 @item direct linking to a dll
7603 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7604 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7605 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7606 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7607 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7608 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7609 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7610 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7611 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7612 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7613
7614 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7615 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7616 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7617 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7618 select the dll instead of an import library.
7619
7620
7621 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7622 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7623
7624 @example
7625 libxxx.dll.a
7626 xxx.dll.a
7627 libxxx.a
7628 xxx.lib
7629 cygxxx.dll (*)
7630 libxxx.dll
7631 xxx.dll
7632 @end example
7633
7634 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7635
7636 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7637 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7638 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7639 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7640 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7641
7642 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7643 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7644 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7645 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7646 could coexist on the same machine.
7647
7648 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7649 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7650 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7651
7652 @example
7653 bin/
7654 cygxxx.dll
7655 lib/
7656 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7657 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7658 @end example
7659
7660 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7661 done two ways:
7662
7663 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7664 @example
7665 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7666 @end example
7667
7668 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7669 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7670 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7671 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7672
7673 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7674 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7675 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7676 making the app/dll.
7677
7678 @example
7679 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7680 @end example
7681
7682 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7683
7684 @example
7685 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7686 @end example
7687
7688 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7689 perfectly legal
7690
7691 @example
7692 bin/
7693 cygxxx-5.dll
7694 lib/
7695 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7696 @end example
7697
7698 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7699 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7700 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7701
7702 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7703 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7704
7705 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7706 work with auto-imported data.
7707
7708 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7709 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7710 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7711 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7712 possible to do this without an import lib.
7713
7714 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7715 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7716 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7717 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7718
7719 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7720 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7721 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7722 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7723 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7724 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7725 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7726
7727 @item symbol aliasing
7728 @table @emph
7729 @item adding additional names
7730 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7731 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7732 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7733 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7734 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7735
7736 @example
7737 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7738
7739 EXPORTS
7740 foo
7741 _foo = foo
7742 @end example
7743
7744 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7745
7746 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7747 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7748
7749 @example
7750 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7751 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7752 @end example
7753
7754 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7755 symbols.
7756
7757 @item renaming symbols
7758 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7759 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7760 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7761 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7762 created). In the following example:
7763
7764 @example
7765 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7766
7767 EXPORTS
7768 _foo = foo
7769 @end example
7770
7771 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7772 @samp{_foo}.
7773 @end table
7774
7775 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7776 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7777 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7778 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7779 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7780 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7781 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7782 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7783 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7784 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7785 which is probably not what you wanted.
7786
7787 @cindex weak externals
7788 @item weak externals
7789 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7790 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7791 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7792 are three variants of weak externals:
7793 @itemize
7794 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7795 called lazy externals.
7796 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7797 This form is not presently implemented.
7798 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7799 implemented.
7800 @end itemize
7801 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7802 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7803 uses a default value.
7804
7805 @cindex aligned common symbols
7806 @item aligned common symbols
7807 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7808 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7809 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7810 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7811 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7812 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7813 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7814 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7815
7816 @end table
7817
7818 @ifclear GENERIC
7819 @lowersections
7820 @end ifclear
7821 @end ifset
7822
7823 @ifset XTENSA
7824 @ifclear GENERIC
7825 @raisesections
7826 @end ifclear
7827
7828 @node Xtensa
7829 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7830
7831 @cindex Xtensa processors
7832 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7833 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7834 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7835 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7836 example, with the command:
7837
7838 @smallexample
7839 SECTIONS
7840 @{
7841 .text : @{
7842 *(.literal .text)
7843 @}
7844 @}
7845 @end smallexample
7846
7847 @noindent
7848 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7849 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7850 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7851 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7852 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7853 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7854 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7855
7856 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7857 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7858 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7859 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7860 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7861 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7862 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7863 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7864 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7865 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7866 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7867 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7868
7869 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7870 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7871 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7872 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7873 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7874 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7875 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7876 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7877 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7878 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7879 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7880 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7881 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7882 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7883
7884 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7885 control the linker:
7886
7887 @cindex Xtensa options
7888 @table @option
7889 @item --size-opt
7890 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7891 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7892 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7893 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7894 preserve the correctness of the code.
7895 @end table
7896
7897 @ifclear GENERIC
7898 @lowersections
7899 @end ifclear
7900 @end ifset
7901
7902 @ifclear SingleFormat
7903 @node BFD
7904 @chapter BFD
7905
7906 @cindex back end
7907 @cindex object file management
7908 @cindex object formats available
7909 @kindex objdump -i
7910 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7911 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7912 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7913 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7914 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7915 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7916 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7917 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7918 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7919
7920 @cindex BFD requirements
7921 @cindex requirements for BFD
7922 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7923 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7924 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7925 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7926 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7927 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7928 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7929
7930 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7931 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7932 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7933 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7934
7935 @menu
7936 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7937 @end menu
7938
7939 @node BFD outline
7940 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7941 @cindex opening object files
7942 @include bfdsumm.texi
7943 @end ifclear
7944
7945 @node Reporting Bugs
7946 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7947 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7948 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7949
7950 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7951
7952 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7953 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7954 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7955 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7956 @command{ld}.
7957
7958 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7959 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7960
7961 @menu
7962 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7963 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7964 @end menu
7965
7966 @node Bug Criteria
7967 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7968 @cindex bug criteria
7969
7970 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7971
7972 @itemize @bullet
7973 @cindex fatal signal
7974 @cindex linker crash
7975 @cindex crash of linker
7976 @item
7977 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7978 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7979
7980 @cindex error on valid input
7981 @item
7982 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7983
7984 @cindex invalid input
7985 @item
7986 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7987 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7988 object files are correct.
7989
7990 @item
7991 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7992 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7993 @end itemize
7994
7995 @node Bug Reporting
7996 @section How to Report Bugs
7997 @cindex bug reports
7998 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7999
8000 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8001 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8002 recommend you contact that organization first.
8003
8004 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8005 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8006 distribution.
8007
8008 @ifset BUGURL
8009 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8010 @value{BUGURL}.
8011 @end ifset
8012
8013 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8014 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8015 fact or leave it out, state it!
8016
8017 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8018 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8019 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8020 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8021 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8022 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8023 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8024 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8025 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8026 and the most helpful.
8027
8028 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8029 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8030 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8031
8032 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8033 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8034 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8035 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8036
8037 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8038
8039 @itemize @bullet
8040 @item
8041 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8042 the @samp{--version} argument.
8043
8044 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8045 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8046
8047 @item
8048 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8049 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8050
8051 @item
8052 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8053 version number.
8054
8055 @item
8056 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8057 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8058
8059 @item
8060 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8061 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8062 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8063 sufficient.
8064
8065 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8066 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8067
8068 @item
8069 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8070 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8071 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8072 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8073 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8074 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8075 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8076 attachments are best.
8077
8078 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8079 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8080 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8081 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8082 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8083
8084 @item
8085 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8086 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8087
8088 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8089 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8090 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8091 a chance to make a mistake.
8092
8093 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8094 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8095 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8096 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8097 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8098 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8099 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8100 any conclusion from our observations.
8101
8102 @item
8103 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8104 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8105 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8106 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8107 context, not by line number.
8108
8109 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8110 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8111 @end itemize
8112
8113 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8114
8115 @itemize @bullet
8116 @item
8117 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8118
8119 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8120 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8121 changes will not affect it.
8122
8123 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8124 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8125 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8126 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8127
8128 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8129 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8130 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8131 less time, and so on.
8132
8133 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8134 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8135
8136 @item
8137 A patch for the bug.
8138
8139 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8140 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8141 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8142 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8143
8144 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8145 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8146 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8147 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8148 fixed.
8149
8150 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8151 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8152 help us to understand.
8153
8154 @item
8155 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8156
8157 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8158 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8159 @end itemize
8160
8161 @node MRI
8162 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8163 @cindex MRI compatibility
8164 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8165 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8166 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8167 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8168 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8169 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8170 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8171
8172 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8173 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8174 features to make use of them.
8175
8176 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8177 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8178
8179 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8180 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8181 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8182 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8183 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8184
8185 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8186
8187 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8188 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8189 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8190
8191 @table @code
8192 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8193 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8194 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8195 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8196 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8197 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8198 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8199 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8200 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8201 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8202 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8203
8204 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8205 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8206 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8207 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8208
8209 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8210
8211 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8212 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8213 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8214 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8215
8216 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8217 @item BASE @var{expression}
8218 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8219 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8220
8221 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8222 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8223 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8224 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8225
8226 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8227 @item END
8228 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8229
8230 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8231 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8232 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8233 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8234
8235 @enumerate
8236 @item
8237 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8238
8239 @item
8240 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8241
8242 @item
8243 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8244 @samp{COFF}
8245 @end enumerate
8246
8247 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8248 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8249 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8250 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8251
8252 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8253 same line, with no change in its effect.
8254
8255 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8256 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8257 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8258 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8259 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8260 command line.
8261
8262 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8263 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8264 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8265 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8266 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8267
8268 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8269 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8270 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8271 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8272 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8273 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8274 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8275 file, in the order specified.
8276
8277 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8278 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8279 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8280 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8281 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8282 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8283
8284 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8285 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8286 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8287 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8288 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8289 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8290 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8291 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8292 @end table
8293
8294 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8295 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8296 @include fdl.texi
8297
8298 @node LD Index
8299 @unnumbered LD Index
8300
8301 @printindex cp
8302
8303 @tex
8304 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8305 % meantime:
8306 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8307 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8308 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8309 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8310 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8311 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8312 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8313 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8314 \page\colophon
8315 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8316 @end tex
8317
8318 @bye